#
1.72 |
|
06-Jan-2023 |
martin |
When matching real partitions to "wanted" install descriptions, skip all types of special partitions (like raw disk, or the MBR container partition for the NetBSD part of the disk). The start of the partition is no unique identifier if we include these in the matching (e.g. boot partition and raw partition may both start at sector 0).
|
#
1.71 |
|
27-Dec-2022 |
martin |
PR 57132: when calculation additional space available for the "expanded" partition (typically /) do not forget the reserved space (that might be required for the system/bootloader/other MD stuff).
|
#
1.70 |
|
16-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Switch back to FFSv2ea as default for new installations
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.69 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
branches: 1.69.2; Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.68 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Temporarily back out rev 1.66 and switch the default FFS type back to FFSv2 (w/o ea) for the upcoming netbsd-10 branch.
|
#
1.67 |
|
09-Dec-2022 |
martin |
A little less (confusing) magic: adjust the size of / when adding /usr only if / has not beenn manually resized.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.71 |
|
27-Dec-2022 |
martin |
PR 57132: when calculation additional space available for the "expanded" partition (typically /) do not forget the reserved space (that might be required for the system/bootloader/other MD stuff).
|
#
1.70 |
|
16-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Switch back to FFSv2ea as default for new installations
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.69 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.68 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Temporarily back out rev 1.66 and switch the default FFS type back to FFSv2 (w/o ea) for the upcoming netbsd-10 branch.
|
#
1.67 |
|
09-Dec-2022 |
martin |
A little less (confusing) magic: adjust the size of / when adding /usr only if / has not beenn manually resized.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.70 |
|
16-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Switch back to FFSv2ea as default for new installations
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.69 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.68 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Temporarily back out rev 1.66 and switch the default FFS type back to FFSv2 (w/o ea) for the upcoming netbsd-10 branch.
|
#
1.67 |
|
09-Dec-2022 |
martin |
A little less (confusing) magic: adjust the size of / when adding /usr only if / has not beenn manually resized.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.70 |
|
16-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Switch back to FFSv2ea as default for new installations
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.69 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.68 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Temporarily back out rev 1.66 and switch the default FFS type back to FFSv2 (w/o ea) for the upcoming netbsd-10 branch.
|
#
1.67 |
|
09-Dec-2022 |
martin |
A little less (confusing) magic: adjust the size of / when adding /usr only if / has not beenn manually resized.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.67 |
|
09-Dec-2022 |
martin |
A little less (confusing) magic: adjust the size of / when adding /usr only if / has not beenn manually resized.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.66 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Switch the default FFS type from FFSv2 to FFSv2ea - we want extended attribute support to be exercised and tested.
If you want to share a new installed disk with older NetBSD installations or (read only) with other OSes you need to explicitly set the FS type to FFSv2 now.
|
#
1.65 |
|
30-Nov-2022 |
martin |
Add support for FFSv2ea in the partition type menus (internally setting fs version to 3 for this, where 2 is FFSv2 and 1 is FFSv1)
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.64 |
|
16-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Fix pasto.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.63 |
|
28-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.62 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.61 |
|
04-May-2022 |
andvar |
s/entires/entries/
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.60 |
|
16-Apr-2022 |
andvar |
fix various typos in comments and log messages.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.59 |
|
20-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR 56303: do not borrow from the default swap allocation if we are in tiny ram conditions and will need to enable swap early.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.58 |
|
13-Feb-2021 |
martin |
PR 55991: when extending the marked partition (typically: the NetBSD root partition) round the new size up to current alignment.
This may lead to a slightly smaller than initialy planned last partition (depending on order added) if the disk size is odd or the partitioning scheme needs some internal space (like GPT) - but it avoids gaps elsewhere due to alignement.
Ideally we would pin all other partitions in a first pass and then let the partitioning backend pick the full available size for the extended partition, but this should be good enough.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.57 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.56 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.55 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, part of previous was not meant to be included yet
|
#
1.54 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Before forcing MBR partitions into our disklabel, make sure they are not there yet - could happen in various paths when reusing existing partitions (or parts of that) - previously we would blindly duplicate identical partitions.
|
#
1.53 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Minor fix to previous: fix condition when we offer the partition type switch - it makes sense even if the disk is partitioned but has no valid partitions.
|
#
1.52 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.51 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Previously we abused pm->ptstart / pm->ptsize to pass the bounds of the NetBSD outer partition to the inner partition editor - but now this is not a valid assumption any more, so explicitly fix the bounds if an outer partition exists.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.49 |
|
05-Oct-2020 |
martin |
Add a heuristic to detect and properly mark EFI system partitions when re-using pre-existing partitions.
|
#
1.48 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions with desired target system layout information, only force the "mount" flag if the existing partitions has a valid mount point.
|
#
1.47 |
|
04-Oct-2020 |
martin |
If we have no explicitly marke target root partition, make sure to set the proper flag on the implicit one.
|
#
1.46 |
|
03-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55384: detangle pm->ptstart from the "install" flag (selecting a target partition). Instead introduce a new PTI_INSTALL_TARGET per partition flag and deal with it in the partitioning backends.
Honour pm->ptstart when allocating new partitions - it is supposed to be the first sector usable by NetBSD.
|
#
1.45 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Apply patch provided by Izumi Tsutsui in PR 55382: make ext2 partitions show up in the outer (MBR) partition table, needed for example on Cobalt where firmware boots from that partition.
|
#
1.44 |
|
28-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55377: mark boot partitions in the partition size display, as suggested by Izumi Tsutsui (minor modifications + all bugs by me)
|
#
1.43 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.42 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Minor tweak to previous: when forcing a /usr partition just to have an arbitrary extendable partition, still use its default size initially.
|
#
1.41 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
When extending a partition (to fill the total disk size) do respect size limits. Do not suggest a size limited partition for extension by default.
|
#
1.40 |
|
11-May-2020 |
martin |
Redo the root-size-limit check again after we grew the root partition for kernel dumps. Auto-enable the /usr partition if it overflows. For all non-root partitions, default to FFSv2.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 is-mlppp-base phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.39 |
|
06-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Only a single partition can ever have the "extend" flag (grow to available size).
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.38 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.37 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.36 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.35 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.34 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.33 |
|
13-Dec-2019 |
martin |
When finding (paritioning scheme native) partition types for file systems from our install description, pass the partition type (not only the file system type). Sometimes (e.g. EFI boot partition on GPT) the filesystem type (MSDOS) is not a unique selector.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.32 |
|
08-Dec-2019 |
martin |
PR install/54745: fix confusion about absolut and NetBSD-partition relative offsets.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.31 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.30 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.29 |
|
25-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Honor the "no_mbr" flag (used especially for raid and xbd devices)
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.28 |
|
21-Oct-2019 |
martin |
Skip unwanted (zero sized) partitions.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.27 |
|
28-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Remove dead (#if 0) code.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.26 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
If we can not fit a planned partition, retry with a bit more slope in size.
|
#
1.25 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: complete initialization of install info for user defined partitions
|
#
1.24 |
|
01-Aug-2019 |
martin |
PR 54423: fix handling of user defined partitions
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.23.2; If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.23 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
If available, show additional names of foreign partitions in the size menu. Makes installing on machines with other OSes installed a lot less confusing.
|
#
1.22 |
|
28-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into the planned installation partitions, keep the separation between the original planned partitions and the pre-exiting partitions. Also do not call found partitions "outer" if they are not (but could be)
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.21 |
|
15-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't overwrite the filesystem type unconditionally with the FFSv1 or v2 setup for an architectures default - now we have /tmp on tmpfs back.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.20 |
|
14-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Don't force mounting of newfs'd partitions. Provide MD hooks for setups where we do not need any bootblocks.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.19 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.18 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When we are going to create (and populate) a new boot partition, we should newfs and mount it.
Fix arguments to the MD_PART_DEFAULTS macro and invoke it a bit earlier (before we shift things around).
|
#
1.17 |
|
09-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When checking for existing NetBSD partitions skip extended MBR and disklabel raw partitions.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.16 |
|
22-Jun-2019 |
christos |
no need to initialize fields that are already 0.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.15 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Avoid creating a (tiny) swap partition by default on overall too small disks.
|
#
1.14 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
mount is an array and can't be NULL (rin)
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.13 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
Use _fmt_ msg_ methods when formats are needed.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.12 |
|
15-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When setting up a "use whole disk" single outer partition, force an empty set of inner partitions immediately,
This avoids reading old (stale) partitions (e.g. disklabel that survived cleaning and re-creating the MBR with the MBR NetBSD partition starting at the same offset) later.
|
#
1.11 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
When merging existing partitions into our install description, mark them as to-be-mounted.
|
#
1.10 |
|
13-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Do not use dynamic size adjustments on install descriptions based on existing partitions - we need to keep them fixed to not confuse free space calculation.
|
#
1.9 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.8 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.7 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226 pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.6 |
|
20-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Convert all static menu struct initializiations to C99 name initializer format - prerequisite for an upcoming evil hack (tm). No functional change intended.
|
#
1.5 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Make use of the new positional parameters to better describe the first partitioning step. Remove size limits/hints encoded in the translations and replace them by values from the code.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020 pgoyette-compat-0930 pgoyette-compat-0906 pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.4 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.4.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.3 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-7-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 netbsd-7-1-2-RELEASE pgoyette-compat-base netbsd-7-1-1-RELEASE matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 netbsd-7-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-1-RC2 netbsd-7-nhusb-base-20170116 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 netbsd-7-1-RC1 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 netbsd-7-0-2-RELEASE localcount-20160914 netbsd-7-nhusb-base pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base netbsd-7-0-1-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RELEASE netbsd-7-0-RC3 netbsd-7-0-RC2 netbsd-7-0-RC1 tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.2.2; 1.2.6; 1.2.20; 1.2.26; (Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|